OWNER’S MANUAL
2013
2013
13PFD41-126-AG Seventh Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 97
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................277
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................377
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 485
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................521
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................571
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 577
10
INDEX
...................................................................587
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................ 12
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If
Equipped ........................... 12
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped . 13
▫ Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . 14
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped ............... 14
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ........ 16
䡵 Sentry Key威 ......................... 17
▫ Replacement Keys ................... 18
▫ Customer Key Programming ............ 19
▫ General Information .................. 19
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ....... 19
▫ Rearming Of The System .............. 19
▫ To Arm The System .................. 20
▫ To Disarm The System ................ 21
䡵 Illuminated Entry ..................... 22
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ............. 22
▫ To Unlock The Doors ................. 23
2
▫ To Lock The Doors ................... 24
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ................. 25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................ 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ......... 26
▫ General Information .................. 26
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ...... 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start .............. 27
䡵 Door Locks .......................... 30
▫ Manual Door Locks .................. 30
▫ Power Door Locks ................... 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................... 33
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ .................. 34
䡵 Windows ........................... 39
▫ Power Windows ..................... 39
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 43
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................ 43
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning .................. 44
▫ Trunk Emergency Release .............. 44
䡵 Occupant Restraints .................... 45
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................. 48
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . 53
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . 54
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 54
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Energy Management Feature ............ 55
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner ................. 56
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 56
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ......... 57
▫ Seat Belt Extender ................... 57
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................ 58
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . 64
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ............. 80
▫ Child Restraints ..................... 81
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations ......... 91
䡵 Safety Tips .......................... 92
▫ Transporting Passengers ............... 92
▫ Exhaust Gas ........................ 93
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 94
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 96
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system con-
sists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip in it,
or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless ignition
system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/
RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
or lock cylinders with either side up.
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
Standard Blade Ignition Key
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Emergency Key Removal (WIN)
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect威 system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key or Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the
ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Ignition
Node (KIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
an authorized dealer.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. This system may also incorporate a
ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in
the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Arm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro-
cess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after
closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-
described arming sequences.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button until
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indi-
cates that the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting
Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information). Then either press the power door LOCK
switch while the driver or passenger door is open, press
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK but-
ton or press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button
(refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information).
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information), press the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™Start/Stop button (requires at least
one valid Key Fob in the vehicle), or insert a valid Key
Fob into the ignition switch (if the Start/Stop button is
removed) and rotate it to the ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect威. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
operation.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
•
System not disabled from previous remote start event
•
Vehicle theft alarm not active
•
Ignition in OFF position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
•
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
•
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) or insert the key
and turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
or ⬙Remote Start Active Key to Run⬙ (vehicles not
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) will display in the
EVIC until you push the START button or turn the key to
the RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,
and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into
the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
•
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
•
The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
•
The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
located on the deck lid.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
•
After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect威, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Do not let children play with the sunroof, and never
leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may re-
sult in serious injury or death.
Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going alll the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Press the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go down automatically.
Manual Down
Press the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
Express Up
Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go up automatically.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Up
Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds or by
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release fea-
ture will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release
Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
nism.
Trunk Emergency Release
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped
with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to
secure a child restraint system. For additional information,
refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in-
crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Knee Air Bags mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and below the glove compartment.
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
2 — Supplemental Driver And
Passenger Side Knee Air Bags
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger
occupant classification system (OCS) that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
occupant weight.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats and the rear seats (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•
Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from several air bag
system components, including the front impact sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front and rear
seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s back trim cover (front seats) or
between the top and side seat’s cushion trim cover (rear
seat). Each air bag deploys independently; a left side
impact deploys the left air bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right air bags only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system.
Occupants, including children who are up against or very
close to SABIC or SAB air bags can be seriously injured or
killed.
Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
SABIC or SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body
outside of the window.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced
protection and work together with the Advanced Front
Air Bags during a frontal impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to
provide improved protection for the driver and front
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag,
Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag, and front
seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several
factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the
front passenger seat
•
OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the sensors estimate that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward
facing infant seat; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Classification
Rearward-facing infant seat* Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deploy-
ment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including
a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
ward facing infant seat.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the
front passenger seat occupant’s most probable classifica-
tion. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front
passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should
be modified.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp-
erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen-
ger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat
belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright
position, your back against the seat back, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not
carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.)
while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen-
ger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel)
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
•
The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger.
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
Not Seated Properly
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional informa-
tion). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the
latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front
passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully
latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may
result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo-
nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as
designed. Do not make any modifications to the front
passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
WARNING!
Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere
with the latch before closing the seat. In addition,
after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin,
make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed
downward and fully latched to the base. Over-
stuffing the storage bin, or a not fully latched pas-
senger seat cushion, may result in misclassification
of the front passenger’s weight. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the ve-
hicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not
interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bag Inflator Units
The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the
instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and
below the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/glove box
surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the full size. The
air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 milliseconds.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
based on several factors, including the severity and type
of collision, the side air bag inflators on the crash side of
the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating SABs exit through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and the door.
The SABs fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. In these
events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the
impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System perform the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power, until the ignition key is re-
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first cycled to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
SABIC or SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing con-
vertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. These
child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
The two outboard seating positions have lower anchor-
ages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats. You can also use the inboard
mounting loops from the each outboard LATCH system
loops to install a child seat when the child seat is
equipped with flexible straps. You should never install
LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share a
common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in
adjacent rear seating positions, or if your child restraints
are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are located just below
the button with the anchorage symbol on the
rear seat, but are not visible. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback
and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a
plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchor-
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Next, extract
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ............................ 103
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ............. 103
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped 104
▫ Outside Mirrors .................... 104
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ........................ 105
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped ........ 105
▫ Power Mirrors ..................... 106
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 106
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . 107
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped ...... 108
▫ Rear Cross Path .................... 113
▫ Modes Of Operation ................. 114
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone (Uconnect威 200) ........ 115
▫ Operation ........................ 117
▫ Phone Call Features ................. 125
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features ............. 127
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .......... 132
3
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone .................... 134
▫ General Information ................. 143
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone (8.4/8.4N) ............. 143
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 NAV .............. 143
▫ Operation ........................ 146
▫ Phone Call Features ................. 158
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features ............. 162
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .......... 167
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone .................... 167
▫ General Information ................. 177
䡵 Voice Command (Uconnect威 200) ......... 178
▫ Voice Command System Operation ...... 178
▫ Commands ....................... 179
▫ Voice Training ..................... 182
䡵 Voice Command ..................... 183
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 NAV .............. 183
▫ Uconnect威 Voice Commands ........... 185
▫ Voice Tree ........................ 186
䡵 Seats ............................. 195
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ............ 196
▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment ........................ 198
▫ Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment .... 199
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped ........................ 200
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ........... 200
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Head Restraints .................... 203
▫ Folding Rear Seat ................... 206
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ........... 207
䡵 Lights ............................ 210
▫ Headlight Switch ................... 210
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..... 211
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 211
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................ 211
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped ........... 212
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ......... 213
▫ Lights-On Reminder ................. 213
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ............. 214
▫ Multifunction Lever ................. 215
▫ Turn Signals ....................... 215
▫ Lane Change Assist ................. 215
▫ High/Low Beam Switch .............. 216
▫ Flash-To-Pass ...................... 216
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ............ 216
▫ Interior Lights ..................... 217
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers ......... 219
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ............. 220
▫ Wiper Operation ................... 220
▫ Mist Feature ....................... 221
▫ Windshield Washers ................. 221
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 221
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...... 222
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ......... 223
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ..... 224
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped .... 226
▫ To Activate ....................... 227
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ............... 228
▫ To Deactivate ...................... 228
▫ To Resume Speed ................... 229
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ............. 229
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ............. 229
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . 230
▫ Parksense威 Sensors .................. 230
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display ........... 231
▫ Parksense威 Display .................. 231
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 ...... 238
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System ............................ 238
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System ........ 241
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions .... 241
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped .......................... 243
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
With Touch Screen Radio ............... 245
䡵 Overhead Console .................... 246
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ............ 246
▫ Sunglass Bin Door .................. 247
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ....... 248
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 ........................ 249
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .......... 250
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ....... 252
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . 253
▫ Using HomeLink威 .................. 254
▫ Security .......................... 255
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ................. 255
▫ General Information ................. 256
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ........... 257
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ........... 258
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ....... 258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............ 258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ....... 258
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................ 259
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............ 259
▫ Sunshade Operation ................. 259
▫ Wind Buffeting ..................... 259
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................ 259
▫ Ignition Off Operation ............... 260
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped ..... 260
䡵 Cupholders ......................... 264
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ............... 264
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ................ 265
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
䡵 Storage ............................ 266
▫ Glovebox Storage ................... 266
▫ Console Features ................... 267
▫ Door Storage ...................... 268
▫ Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped .... 269
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . 270
䡵 Cargo Area Features .................. 270
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat ................ 270
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped ............. 273
▫ Cargo Tie-Downs ................... 273
▫ Ski Pass-Through ................... 274
䡵 Rear Window Features ................. 274
▫ Rear Window Defroster ............... 274
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and
only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain 3 LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
to the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when
the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Power Mirror Control
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
•
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
•
If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled
and used.
Uconnect姞 Phone (Uconnect姞 200)
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect威 website for sup-
ported phones.
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit
www.UconnectPhone.com.
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
Uconnect威 features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect威 Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be focused on the
safe operation of the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in a collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
The steering wheel controls will contain the
two control buttons (Uconnect威 Phone
button and Voice Command button) that
will enable you to access the system. When you
press the Uconnect威 Phone
button you will hear a
BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button
When you press the Voice Command
button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
The Uconnect威 Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect威 website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect威 Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following
compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect威 Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect威 Phone will then play some of
the options.
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the steering wheel.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing
process make sure they are switched to off or the
bluetooth is disabled before proceeding.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to Uconnect威 Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect威 Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked “Should paired device be set as
Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to
your Uconnect威 Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to
your Uconnect威 System. The priority allows the
Uconnect威 Phone to know which mobile • phone to
use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the
same time.
•
Start paring procedure on device. See device manual
for instructions.
•
Select Uconnect威 on the device and enter the four-digit
Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed on
radio into your mobile phone.
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile”, where
John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the
Uconnect威 phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To
learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to
“Add Names to Your Uconnect威 Phonebook”, in the
phonebook.
•
The Uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect威 Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect威 Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from the Uconnect威 Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the
mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
phone connection.
Delete Uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect威 Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect威 Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
press and hold the
button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cancellation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect威 Phone to the mobile phone.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect威 Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect威 Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S., and
Canada, 080 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as com-
pared to using the mobile phone directly.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect威 Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect威 System,
•
and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Roadside Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Roadside Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect威 Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to say the “number.” If you wish
to send the name say “Send Name” followed by a valid
name from the phonebook. Uconnect威 Phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect威 Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect威 Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect威 Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect威 Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the
button and say “Select”
or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect威 Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect威 Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect威 Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone
Uconnect威 Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect威
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect威 Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
You can either press the Uconnect威 Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect威 Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
Uconnect威 Voice Command Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features,
press the
button and say “Voice Command Tuto-
rial.”
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect威 Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect威 Phone and your phone is sup-
ported, an announcement will be made to notify you that
you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new
message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect威 Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect威 Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect威 Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Uconnect姞 Phone (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Uconnect威 Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
•
Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
•
Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
•
Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smiths Mobile”).
•
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•
Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).
•
View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
Recent Calls”).
•
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Screen Activated Features:
•
Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touch-screen.
•
Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
•
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
•
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
•
Sending a text message via the touch-screen.
•
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the
touch-screen.
•
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth威 for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local applicable
laws and phone use. All attention should be focused
on the safe operation of the vehicle. Failure to do so
may result in an accident causing serious injury or
death.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect威 Phone.
The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
The Uconnect威 Phone
Button is used to get
into the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-
book etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Uconnect威 Voice Command Button
The Uconnect威 Voice Command
Button
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The
button is also used to access the Voice
Commands for the Uconnect威 Voice Command features
if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect威
Voice Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
ods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or an-
other prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts
and say each part of the command when you are asked
for it. For example, you can use the compound com-
mand form voice command “Search for John Smith”,
or you can break the compound command form into
two voice commands: “Search Contact” and when
asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect威
Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver-
sational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few
feet/meters away from you.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect威 Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Voice Command
button.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and say a command or say “help”. All
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also press the
or buttons when the
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
main or previous menu.
NOTE: Pressing the
or buttons while the
system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to
“Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further
information.
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
NOTE:
•
You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
•
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect威 screen.
•
If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect威 Phone main screen,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect威 screen,
•
See Step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this
is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over
other paired phones within range.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
•
Touch the “More” soft-key to begin,
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
screen,
•
Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
•
When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre-
cedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
•
“Show Paired Phones” or
•
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
•
Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin,
•
Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
•
Touch the “Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
•
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
screen,
•
Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
•
When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
•
“Show Paired Audio Devices”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Uconnect威 Phone will automatically connect to the high-
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you would need to choose a particular phone or
Audio Device follow these steps:
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the Phone/Bluetooth威 soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
currently connected device,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
•
Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
•
Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
•
The options pop-up will be displayed,
•
Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list,
•
Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the appro-
priate number. Touch the + next to the selected number to
display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key and
then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the +
on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phone-
book. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To Remove A Favorite
•
To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
•
Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
•
Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
•
The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs”.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these
steps.
•
Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
•
Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the
bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing
Favorites.
•
Touch the + Options soft-key.
•
Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
•
The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
to default.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth威 on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect威 Phone.
•
Redial
•
Dial by touching in the number
•
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
•
Favorite Phonebook
•
Mobile Phonebook
•
Recent Call Log
•
SMS Message Viewer
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with 1 call or less active.
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number
248-555-1212.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
Press the button to begin,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
features:
•
Answer
•
End
•
Ignore
•
Hold/unhold
•
Mute/unmute
•
Transfer the call to/from the phone
•
Swap 2 active calls
•
Join 2 active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
•
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
•
Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
•
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
•
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call”.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
the
button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
•
Incoming Calls
•
Outgoing Calls
•
Missed Calls
•
All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
You can also press the
button and say “Show my
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the
button to accept the call. To ignore the call,
touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You can
also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the blue caller
ID box.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the phone
button, answer
soft-key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also press the
button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automati-
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
Redial
•
Press the “Redial” soft-key,
•
or press the and after the “Listening” prompt and
the following beep, say “Redial”,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial”,
•
The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth威 connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call Emergency or Dial Emergency” and the
Uconnect威 Phone will instruct the paired mobile
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE:
•
The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by
touch.
•
The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touch-screen or press the
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the
button and say, “Send 3 7
4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence
of numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you press the
button and say
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect威 Phone will
then send the corresponding phone number associated
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
•
Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial-
ing a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
the
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
•
Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
•
Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length,
•
Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
show your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect威 Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect威 Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone simply touch the
Mute button on the Phone main screen.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button
on the Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect威 Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
•
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS (Short Message Service)
over Bluetooth威 in order to use this feature. If the
Uconnect威 Phone determines your phone is not compat-
ible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth威 the “Messag-
ing” button will be greyed out and the feature will not be
available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect威 Phone SMS is only available when
the vehicle is not in moving.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
•
Send a Reply
•
Forward
•
Call
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
•
Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
•
Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
•
If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent,
•
Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
•
Press the button,
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
•
After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the
button and
saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Voice Tree
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
•
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
“Other”.
•
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
•
Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect威
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
•
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
•
If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
•
Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
•
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
“Other”.
•
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
•
Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect威
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
•
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
•
If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
•
Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect姞 200)
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local applicable
laws. All attention should be focused on the safe
operation of the vehicle. Failure to do so may result
in a collision causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command button, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect威
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect威 Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
VOICE COMMAND
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
Sirius Travel Link.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local applicable
laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway
ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Uconnect威 Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
•
I didn’t understand
•
I didn’t get that, etc.,
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session with end.
Pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect威 Voice
Command
button and say “Help”. You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect威 Voice Command
button.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect姞 Voice Commands
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Com-
mand
button.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect威 Voice
Command
button.
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
This command can be given in any mode or screen:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Voice Tree
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”.
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station
named received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding
names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when CD
is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music database provided by Gracenote.
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”.
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or “Show
ski info” to get other forecasts.
4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”,
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find Recently
Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertain-
ment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”,
“Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”, “Po-
lice Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Power Seat Switch
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
Power Lumbar Switch
Front Seat Adjustment
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front seats may be equipped with
heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect威 System.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Seat Height Adjustment
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect威 8.4 and
8.4 Nav:
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect威 display.
Controls Soft-Key
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second time
to select LO-level heating. Touch the soft-key a third time
to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Push Button
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loops
Folded Rear Seatback
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
3. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release from
stowage retainer.
Hood Safety Latch
Hood Prop Rod
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Place the hood prop rod in hood slot to secure the
hood in the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
Headlight Switch
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
•
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
•
The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the
SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal opera-
tion of low beams).
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
NOTE:
•
SmartBeam™ can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,
film, and other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are
off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch
must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the
feature will deactivate.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the lens.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEU-
TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than
5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect威 System.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will
turn off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Electronic Speed Control Switches
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: After pressing the SET button “Cruise Control
Set” message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another
switch is pressed.
For analog speedometer: The red outer line on the
speedometer changes from red to white to identify set
speed.
For digital speedometer: The MPH reading turns from
white to red to identify set speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
NOTE: After pressing the OFF button a “Cruise Control
off” message is displayed for 5 seconds or until another
switch is pressed.
For analog speedometer: The white outer line on the
speedometer returns to red.
For digital speedometer: The MPH reading returns from
red to white.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph ( 1 km/h ) depends on
selection of US or Metric units using the left hand
Steering Wheel Buttons, and EVIC display.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect威 Sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense威 Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the object’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound
tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
Park Assist System Off
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
One-Half Second Tone Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Slow Tone Fast Tone
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone Fast Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Continuous Tone Continuous Tone
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow (for
rear center
only)
Slow (for
rear center
only)
Fast (for
rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left
Rear
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
Arc —
Center Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
Arc — Right
Rear
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect威 System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect威 Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the ParkSense威 soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is mal-
functioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “WIPE OFF REAR PARK
ASSIST SENSORS”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS”
or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will
display the “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS”,
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears
in the EVIC make sure the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an
authorized dealer.
Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors
Service Park Assist Sensors
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system will be automati-
cally disabled when there are faulted conditions outside
of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the
feature from functioning properly. The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED⬙ message. If “PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM DISABLED” appears in the EVIC, cycle the
ignition. If the message appears again, see an authorized
dealer.
Service Park Assist System
Park Assist System Disabled
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威 off, the EVIC will display
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds.
•
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense威 system might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
•
Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SENSORS” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
first flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Touch
Screen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview威
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the lens.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Sunglass Bin Door
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on
the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Ignition OFF Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi-
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
•
The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
The 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet is
located on the lower instrument panel, below the climate
controls. The power outlet has power available when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. The
power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 cigar
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Instrument Panel Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
There is also a 12 volt power outlet located in the center
console. This power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
Center Console Outlet
Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)
1— F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
2— F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.
Front Cupholders
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder Rear Seat Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on the
release handle to open the glovebox storage compart-
ment.
Glovebox Storage Compartment
Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console forward of the shift lever.
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Door Trim Storage
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
tether to open the storage compartment.
Passenger Seat Cushion Tether
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
Rear Armrest Storage
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loops
Folded Rear Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie-downs,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Downs
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
15 minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features .............. 280
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base .............. 281
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium Analog ..... 282
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium Digital ..... 283
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .......... 284
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . 297
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System ..... 299
▫ Two Button EVIC — If Equipped ........ 300
▫ Four Button EVIC — If Equipped ....... 307
䡵 Uconnect威 Settings ................... 327
▫ Hard-Keys ........................ 327
▫ Soft-Keys ......................... 327
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect威 System 8.4 Settings ........... 327
䡵 Uconnect威 200 — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Siriusxm™
Radio............................... 339
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode .... 339
4
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 345
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ...... 347
▫ Enter/Browse Button
(CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 349
▫ Info Button
(CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 350
▫ Operation Instructions —
Auxiliary Mode ..................... 350
▫ Operation Instructions —
Universal Serial Bus (USB) .............. 350
▫ Security .......................... 351
䡵 CD Player — If Equipped .............. 351
▫ CD Player Operating Instructions ........ 352
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control With Uconnect威
Voice Command — If Equipped ............ 352
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device ............................ 353
▫ Using This Feature .................. 354
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons ............. 354
▫ Play Mode ........................ 355
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................ 356
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ...... 358
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ........... 359
▫ Radio Operation .................... 359
▫ CD Player ........................ 360
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance ............. 360
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ...... 361
䡵 Climate Controls ..................... 361
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning —
If Equipped ........................ 362
▫ Uconnect威 8.4 Climate Controls —
If Equipped ........................ 366
▫ Climate Control Functions ............. 372
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .... 373
▫ Operating Tips ..................... 374
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Demister 5 — Glove Compartment 9 — Trunk Release
2 — Outlet 6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/
Uconnect威 System Hard Controls
10 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Power Outlet 11 — Dimmer Control
4 — Radio/Uconnect威 System 8 — Ignition Switch 12 — Headlight Switch
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
3. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
6. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime
will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
8. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
12. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
13. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
16. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
18. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
19. Electronic Speed Control Set Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control has been set.
20. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
22. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display
Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto-
matic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
23. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
28. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc.). For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”.
29. Electronic Speed Control Indicator
This telltale will illuminate amber when the
electronic speed control is ON. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-
tronic speed control is SET. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
30. Amber Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Reconfigurable Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber telltales (Low
Fuel Telltale, Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator,
Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale). For further
information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)”.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31. Red Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Reconfigurable Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales (Door(s)
Ajar, Oil Pressure Warning Telltale, Charging System
Telltale, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale, Engine
Temperature Warning Telltale, Electric Power Steering
Malfunction). For further information, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
32. ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
habits and vehicle usage.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
1 — EVIC Steering Wheel Controls
2 — EVIC Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is ⬙Automatic High Beams
On⬙.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but-
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Two Button EVIC — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
Odometer
•
Digital Vehicle Speed
•
Trip Info
•
Range To Empty
•
Fuel Economy Info
•
Cruise Control Info
•
Stored Messages
•
Tire Pressure
•
Settings
•
Units
•
Language
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus (Odometer,
Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To
Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel
Economy, Stored Messages, Settings).
RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the sub-menu screens of a main menu
item. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Messages
•
Key Fob Battery Low
•
Wrong Key Fob
•
Key Fob Damaged
•
Key In Ignition
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC Controls)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
•
Left Turn Signal Out
•
Right Turn Signal Out
•
Turn Signal On
•
Lights On
•
Low Beam Headlight Out
•
High Beam Headlight Out
•
License Plate Light Out
•
Backup Light Out
•
Brake Light Out
•
Parking Light Out
•
Service Airbag System
•
Service Airbag Warning Light
•
Washer Fluid Low
•
Parking Brake Engaged
•
Brake Fluid Low
•
Service Electronic Braking System
•
Engine Temperature Hot
•
Battery Voltage Low
•
Oil Pressure Low
•
Fuel Low
•
Service Antilock Brake System
•
Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
Transmission Too Hot
•
Service Power Steering
•
Oil Temperature Hot
•
Check Fuel Cap
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Oil Change Due
•
Service Tire Pressure System
•
Inflate Tire to XX
•
Coolant Low
•
Rain Sensor Fail
•
Traction Control Off
•
Engine Warming Wait To Start
•
Too Cold Plug In Heater
•
Cruise Off
•
Cruise Ready
•
Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•
Cruise Set To XXX km/h
•
Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•
Door Open
•
Doors Open
•
Trunk open
•
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
•
Remote Start Active Key To Run
•
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•
Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•
Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
EVIC Main Menu
To step to each main menu feature press and release the
UP button once for each step. A step from the last item in
the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be
displayed. The following features are in the Main menu:
•
Odometer
•
Outside Temperature Display
•
Digital Vehicle Speed
•
Trip Info
•
Range To Empty
•
Fuel Economy Info
•
Cruise Control Info
•
Stored Messages
•
Tire Pressure
•
Settings
•
Units
•
Language
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset
(Average Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with
a RIGHT arrow button graphic and the word RESET next
to it.
Trip Info
Press and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info
icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip
features in the next screen:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON or START position.
Resetting A Trip Info Function
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
function you want to reset using the UP button. Push the
RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero.
Range To Empty (RTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value.
When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the RIGHT arrow button (as prompted in the
EVIC display). Upon reset, the history information will
be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
fuel average reading before the reset.
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100
Kilometers (L/100km)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP button until ⬙Tire Pressure⬙ is
displayed.
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or
the graphic.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To
XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire
pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire
pressure values that are too low will be flashing.
•
If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Service
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire Pressure is an infor-
mation only function and cannot be reset.
Stored Messages
When a stored warning message is present, this
icon is displayed in the lower left side of the
Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pressing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings — EVIC Units And Language Selection
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty
and Tire Pressure features. Press and Release the RIGHT
arrow button to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙MET-
RIC⬙.
Press the UP arrow button until the Language is dis-
played, then press the Right arrow button to select
English, Francais, or Espanol depending on availability.
Four Button EVIC — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
Radio Info
•
Fuel Economy Info
•
Screen Setup
•
Digital Vehicle Speed
•
Analog Vehicle Speed
•
Trip Info
•
Tire Pressure
•
Vehicle Info
•
Stored Warning Messages
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
The system allows the driver to select information by pressing
the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item. Press and hold
the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
LEFT Arrow Button
Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button EVIC Controls)
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of the follow sections:
1. Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
2. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white
for on demand information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
4. Menu Titles / Odometer
5. Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
6. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
7. Reconfigurable Telltales
8. Audio / Phone Information
9. Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus
is shown here.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
•
Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•
Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Service Airbag System
•
Traction Control Off
•
Washer Fluid Low
•
Oil Pressure Low
•
Oil Change Due
•
Fuel Low
•
Service Antilock Brake System
•
Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
Service Power Steering
•
Cruise Off
•
Cruise Ready
•
Cruise Set To XXX MPH
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
•
Service Tire Pressure System
•
Parking Brake Engaged
•
Brake Fluid Low
•
Service Electronic Braking System
•
Engine Temperature Hot
•
Battery Voltage Low
•
Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
Lights On
•
Right Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Turn Signal Light Out
•
Turn Signal On
•
Vehicle Not in Park
•
Key in Ignition
•
Key in Ignition Lights On
•
Remote Start Active Key to Run
•
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
•
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•
Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•
Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
•
Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•
Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
•
Service Airbag System
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
•
Service Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•
Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•
Door Open
•
Doors Open
•
Trunk Open
•
Gear Not Available
•
Shift Not Allowed
•
Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
•
Autostick Unavailable Service Required
•
Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
•
Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
•
Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
•
Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
•
Service Transmission
•
Service Shifter
•
Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
•
Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
•
Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•
Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
•
Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
•
Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale – If
Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
•
Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
ajar.
•
Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•
Charging System Telltale
This telltale shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the telltale stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging
system telltale remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain
SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
telltale comes on while driving, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle
will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the telltale is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
•
Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•
Electric Power Steering Malfunction
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
EVIC White Telltales
•
Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will illuminate amber when the
electronic speed control is ON. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Green Telltales
•
Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-
tronic speed control is SET. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Full Speedometer Analog Or Digital Display
Selection
Full Speedometer Analog Icon
Full Speedometer Digital Icon
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
change the display between analog and digital.
Vehicle Speed MPH / Km/h
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. Press the RIGHT arrow
button to view a digital display of the current
speed in MPH or km/h. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h. Press the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis-
played. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll
through the following information sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
⬙Tire Pressure⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
•
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
•
If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Inflate Tire To
XX⬙ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
Tire Pressure Analog Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
⬙Coolant Temperature⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press
and release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant
temperature will be displayed.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted. Press the RIGHT arrow button and the
next screen will display the following:
•
Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar-
graph)
•
Range To Empty (RTE)
•
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Tire Pressure Digital Display
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy Analog Display Fuel Economy Digital Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
The EVIC has the capability of displaying an interactive
flower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which will
add one flower pedal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon
(MPG) increment. Once the vehicle reached 30 MPG the
EVIC will display a full flower.
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy — If Equipped
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The
word ⬙RESET>⬙ (with right arrow) appears next to it.
Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel
Economy which displays ⬙0⬙ immediately after reset.
Then, the history information will be erased, and the
averaging will continue from the last fuel average read-
ing before the reset.
Range To Empty (RTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE displayed value.
When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new RTE value will display. Press
the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta-
neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the RTE, this
function cannot be reset. Press the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in
the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the following three trip fea-
tures in the next screen:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
Trip Info Analog Display
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions or press the LEFT arrow button
to return to the main menu.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following
information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON or START position.
Resetting A Trip Info Function
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN
buttons. Press the RIGHT arrow button until the feature
displays zero.
Trip Info Digital Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Stored Messages
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages display icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pressing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are. Press the LEFT arrow button to
return to the Main Menu.
Screen Setup
Screen Setup Display Analog Icon
Screen Setup Display Digital Icon
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change the location that information is displayed
within the instrument cluster. Use the UP and DOWN
buttons to highlight a screen setup location (i.e., Upper
Left, Upper Right, etc.) then press the RIGHT arrow
button to select the location and make changes. Press the
UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you
would like to display in that location (i.e., Date, Time,
Outside Temp, etc.) and press the RIGHT arrow button to
save the display setting. You can press the LEFT arrow
button at any time to back out of a sub-menu selection.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The Screen Setup items are only available at
speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). All other menu items
are not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle is
shifted into gear, this feature is locked out and the main
screen will display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In
Motion”.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Speedometer
•
Analog 1
•
Analog 2
•
Digital 1 (default setting)
•
Digital 2
Gear Display
•
Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting)
•
Single Character (D)
•
Word (Drive)
Upper Left
•
None
•
Compass
•
Outside Temp (default setting)
•
Time
•
Range To Empty (RTE)
•
Average MPG
•
Current MPG
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Upper Right
•
None
•
Compass (default setting)
•
Outside Temp
•
Time
•
Range To Empty (RTE)
•
Average MPG
•
Current MPG
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
Lower Left
•
None (default setting)
•
Compass
•
Outside Temp
•
Time
Lower Right
•
None (default setting)
•
Compass
•
Outside Temp
•
Time
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
•
Cancel
•
Okay
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect姞 SETTINGS
The Uconnect威 system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect威 system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect姞
System 8.4 Settings
Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect威 system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
•
Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
•
Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
•
Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
•
Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Show Time In Status Bar
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
Safety / Assistance
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
•
Park Assist
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.
•
Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•
ParkView威 Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView威 Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
•
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
•
Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head-
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
•
Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•
Flash Headlight With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
•
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
•
Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
•
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st
Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If
driver door first is selected, once the driver door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
•
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
•
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your
selection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
•
Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone system (if equipped),
power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status
touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
•
Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
•
Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
•
Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•
Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
•
Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
•
Music Info Cleanup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
•
Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
•
Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect威 Supplement.
SiriusXM™ Setup
After pressing the SiriusXM™ Setup soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
•
Channel Skip
SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
•
Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
Write down the SiriusXM™ ID numbers for your re-
ceiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number
listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate
subscription.
Uconnect姞 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM™
RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Uconnect威 200
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME
control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for
the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the
right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding either button will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are
highlighted.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side ENTER/
BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will highlight.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
5. To exit, press the TIME button or press the BACK
button to return to the previous menu.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display.
Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME,
and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.
NOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR.
Selecting one of these options will change the way the
clock is displayed.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Or
Fade
To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade
settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio
sub-menu.
The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing the
MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Press
the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu
and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select
Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once the
desired selection is highlighted, press the ENTER/
BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will dis-
play. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones.
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time and
MID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the mid-range tones.
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de-
crease the treble tones.
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise adjust the sound
level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level
between the front and rear speakers.
Press the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble,
Balance or Fade.
MENU Button
Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between
the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu set-
ting is highlighted press the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the setting. The following items are selectable:
Radio Mode
•
Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow
you to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or
Fade, just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the
BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the
Main Menu.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press
the ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The
minutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the
right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the
ENTER/BROWSE button to save time change.
Player Mode
•
Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to
the appropriate browse menu depending on the device
currently playing (will function the same as pressing
the browse button while in that mode). This will only
appear in the menu if the device currently playing can
support these features.
•
Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes
the order of the files). This will only appear in the
menu if the device currently playing can support these
features.
•
Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the cur-
rently playing song will begin again when it ends. It
will continue to cycle through the same song until
repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one
for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is
ejected 2) A different track list within that source is
initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This
will only appear in the menu if the device currently
playing can support these features.
•
Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow
you to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or
Fade, just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the
BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the
Main Menu.
•
Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press
the ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
minutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the
right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the
ENTER/BROWSE button to save time change.
System Info
•
Selecting System Info will display the software ver-
sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID.
RADIO Button
Press the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite
mode if equipped.
Buttons1-5
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM (A, B,
C) and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations.
To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press and hold the
button (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station for
3 seconds.
You may add a second or third station to each pushbut-
ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:
Press the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each
button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and. This
allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations to be
stored into pushbutton memory.
Player Button
Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB/iPOD, AUX,
Bluetooth).
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
Uconnect威 200 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3/WMA modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)
This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the MENU button to display the Player menu. Use
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menu
setting is highlighted press the ENTER/BROWSE button
to select the setting and turn it on or off.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If
one is selected while the other is currently active the
currently active one will be changed to OFF. These
settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle
is on in iPod威, moving to CD will not have shuffle On
unless it was previously set to On.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play)
Pressing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list of
all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is
done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Se-
lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button
will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE:
•
The head unit will have no control of the AUX device.
You can only control the volume on the head unit. No
information about the song will be displayed.
•
The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down and radio volume up.
Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus (USB)
The USB audio input which allows the user to plug in a
flash drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to am-
plify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
USB an iPod or external USB drive is connected.
Pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USB
mode will bring up a list of available categories within
the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Album, All Songs, and Genre. Browsing through the
categories will function the same as iPod browse. USB
will not have folder browsing.
If the USB connected does not have any audio files and
the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen
will display, “No audio files on device” this messaged is
to be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files
when connected and selected.
Security
If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a
matching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secu-
rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.
CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED
The single disc CD player is located in the center console.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position before the CD player will operate.
•
The CD Player is part of the radio for the Media Center
200 (Sales Code RAE).
CD Player
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
CD Player Operating Instructions
Loading
To insert disc into the player, follow the instructions
shown:
1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of
the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is
illuminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into
the CD player.
2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the
light below the loading slot will turn off.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the CD player, press the EJT button
and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded.
Uconnect威 — If Equipped
If equipped with Uconnect威 8.4, refer to the Uconnect威
8.4 manual for further information.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect姞
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
If equipped with Uconnect威 8.4, refer to the Uconnect威
User’s Manual for further details on iPod威, USB, and
MP3 usage.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
NOTE: The center console will have a position where
the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device cable can
be routed through without damaging the cable when
closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
USB device and display data:
•
Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the
next or previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to
the start of the current track. Pressing the SEEK >>
button during play mode will jump to the next track in
the list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or
Previous Track⬙.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
•
Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on
the USB/iPod device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. To stop SCAN mode and
start playing the desired track, when it is playing the
track, press the SHUFFLE button again.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•
In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used
as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
To exit Browse mode without making a selection, press
the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
Browse button: The Browse button will display the
top level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device.
Press and then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select. This will dis-
play the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device sub-
menu levels are available on this system.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
er’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect威 phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect威
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect威 phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect威
phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to start at the begin-
ning of the current music track.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect威 (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect威 8.4 system display if equipped.
When the Uconnect威 8.4 system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-
senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
the display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
1. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start opera-
tion if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) position.
2. Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar-
ily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Manual Temperature Control
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
•
Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the
Recirculation button is pressed while in this mode, the
LED indicator will flash several times then go out.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically is this
mode is selected.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
3. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera-
tures, while rotating right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4. Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right
into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature
and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
5. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of
two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a
particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive
from that mode.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Front Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second
time.
NOTE:
•
You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
•
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Uconnect姞 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect威 8.4
screen, in the center of the instrument panel.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 8.4 system
screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the automatic opera-
tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
2. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Uconnect威 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
3. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position. Blower control should be left in the “ON”
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
cool the vehicle
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
tings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
9. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
10. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-
cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
11. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati-
cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
•
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort
conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
•
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
•
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
•
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When the defrost mode is selected, the
blower level may increase.
13. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
NOTE:
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru-
ment panel.
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 8.4 system
screen.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature hard or soft control buttons (6, 7, 10, 11).
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect威 8.4 System Settings”
in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Manual Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
•
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures ................... 381
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ...... 381
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped .... 382
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped ....... 382
▫ Normal Starting .................... 382
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –30°F Or ⫺34°C) ............... 384
▫ Extended Park Starting ............... 384
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ............... 384
▫ After Starting ...................... 385
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” – If Equipped . 385
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ....... 385
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ....... 386
▫ Shifting .......................... 386
▫ Downshifting ...................... 387
䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 388
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............ 390
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . 391
5
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(1.4L Turbo Engine Only — Ddct) ......... 391
▫ Gear Ranges ...................... 392
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(2.0L And 2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) ...... 401
▫ Gear Ranges ...................... 402
䡵 AutoStick威 ......................... 408
▫ Operation ........................ 408
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............ 410
▫ Acceleration ....................... 410
▫ Traction .......................... 410
䡵 Driving Through Water ................ 411
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................ 411
▫ Shallow Standing Water .............. 412
䡵 Parking Brake ....................... 413
䡵 Power Steering ...................... 416
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System .......... 417
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......... 417
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ............. 419
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .......... 420
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ........ 420
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............ 421
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ............... 422
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ........ 424
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................ 428
▫ Tire Markings ..................... 428
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ........ 432
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ....... 434
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ......... 435
䡵 Tires — General Information ............ 439
▫ Tire Pressure ...................... 439
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 440
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . 442
▫ Radial Ply Tires .................... 442
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 442
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ....... 443
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped ........... 444
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ........ 444
▫ Tire Spinning ...................... 445
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................ 446
▫ Life Of Tire ....................... 446
▫ Replacement Tires .................. 447
䡵 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ............ 449
䡵 Snow Tires ......................... 450
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations .......... 451
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 452
▫ Base System ....................... 454
▫ Premium System – If Equipped ......... 457
▫ General Information ................. 460
䡵 Fuel Requirements .................... 460
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine .................. 460
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine ................ 460
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ............... 461
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........... 461
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ..... 462
▫ MMT In Gasoline ................... 463
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .............. 463
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................ 463
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 464
䡵 Adding Fuel ........................ 465
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............. 465
䡵 Vehicle Loading ..................... 468
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ............. 468
䡵 Trailer Towing ....................... 470
▫ Common Towing Definitions ........... 470
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ............ 472
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 473
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 474
▫ Towing Requirements ................ 475
▫ Towing Tips ....................... 481
䡵
Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
. 483
▫
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
. 483
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•
The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
•
If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an igni-
tion switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and
START. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –30°F or ⫺34°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L
Turbo and 2.4L engines and recommended for the 2.0L
engine.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve-
hicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 25 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
60 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” – If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
En-
gine
Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
1.4L,
2.0L
and
2.4L
En-
gines
Accel. 15 (24) 24
(39)
34
(55)
47
(76)
56
(90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19
(31)
27
(43)
37
(60)
41
(66)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage, and/or clutch disc
damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
(KM/H)
Gear
Selec-
tion
6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2to1
Maxi-
mum
Speed
80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position and the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition cylinder switch to warn you that
this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the key fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Engine Only — DDCT)
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, press the button on the front of the
shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in this section for further informa-
tion). Moving the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
while in the AutoStick威 position (beside the Drive posi-
tion) will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5,
4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Shift Lever
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, press the brake
pedal, and press the button on the front of the shift
knob. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch auto-
matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar
to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become
familiar with some of the normal operational character-
istics of the DDCT:
•
During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
the transmission.
•
Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
warning message will display in the Instrument Clus-
ter if cool down actions are needed.
•
When stopped on an incline, always hold the vehicle
in place using the brakes. On steep inclines, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
•
Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds,
use the AutoStick威 shift control (refer to “AutoStick威”in
this section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis-
sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission oil is suffi-
ciently warm.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
GEAR NOT AVAILABLE
In AutoStick威 mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due
to a fault condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This
occurs if NEUTRAL is requested while moving (with the throttle
opened), if REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h]
or faster), if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph
[10 km/h] or faster), or if 3rd gear or higher is requested at a stop.
Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – THEN D or R The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault con-
dition, or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE
with the brakes released), but the shift lever remains in gear. Shift into
NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving. If the trans-
mission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
AUTOSTICK NOT AVAILABLE AutoStick威 mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault. See your au-
thorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
AUTOMATIC MODE NOT
AVAILABLE
The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault
condition. Use the AutoStick威 mode to shift the transmission manually.
See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
REDUCE GEAR CHANGES The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick威 mode, try to
drive in one specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear
changes. In DRIVE, the transmission will automatically modify its shift
schedule to reduce the number of shifts.
TRANS. GETTING HOT PRESS
BRAKE
The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated
launches in stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to
cool in NEUTRAL until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE ” is dis-
played.
TRANS. HOT STOP SAFELY SHIFT
TO P
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over and shift the
transmission into PARK and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS.
COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for
diagnosis and service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for
diagnosis and service.
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning prop-
erly. Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll
when in PARK.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
to be available. The “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24)
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, press the button on the front of the
shift lever, and move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in this section for further informa-
tion). Moving the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-)
while in the AutoStick威 position (beside the Drive posi-
tion) will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5,
4, 3, 2, 1.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, press the brake
pedal, and press the button on the front of the shift
knob. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
transmission operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
•
the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the trans-
mission is sufficiently warm.
AUTOSTICK姞
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or
overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen, except as described below.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•
The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en-
gaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
To disengage AutoStick威 mode, return the shift lever to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick威 position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” message is displayed the EVIC
screen, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for potential service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Trailer Sway Control (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake
Lock Differential (BLD), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, reduces stop distance, and enhances vehicle
control during stop.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the ABS. The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warn-
ing Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
If both the “Brake System Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-
pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The system monitors the amount of wheel spin at each
wheel by using individual wheel speed sensors. If wheel
spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS
and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for more
information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Light” will flash, the engine
power will be reduced, and you will feel the brake being
applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
•
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Ve-
hicle Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver’s foot is removed from the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle can roll after brake
pressure is released. The system will release brake pres-
sure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of
travel.
Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure
NOTE: Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present
with this feature disabled.
Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired. This procedure
applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech
transmission.
1. Wheels must be pointed straight ahead, on a level
surface.
2. Automatic transmission should be in PARK.
3. Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped
4. Begin with the ignition OFF.
5. Engage park brake.
6. Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off.
7. Apply brake pedal.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise,
just over half a turn from center position. Press the ⬙ESC
off ⬙ button 4 times.
9. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue
in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center.
10. Turn the ignition to off position.
11. If procedure was done correctly, ESC malfunction
lamp will flashfour times after engine starts.
12. Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds.
13. Repeat the condition to re-enable Hill Start Assist
(HSA).
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 2–7% approximate grade (de-
pending on equipped transmission).
•
Gear selection matches vehicle direction (i.e., vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in all forward gears, reverse and neutral
(if equipped with a manual transmission) when the
activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to
select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under-steer
and vehicle over-steer. The system uses engine torque
reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to
correct under-steer and over-steer conditions.
•
Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Off Indicator Light
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
In some cases, when accelerating from stop on steep
grades, it may be beneficial to turn off ESC. Once the
grade ascent is complete, ESC can be turned on again.
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
•
ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent collisions.
•
The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash to indicate the system is actively cor-
recting an undesirable vehicle condition. This includes
Yaw control, traction control, and trailer sway control. If
the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions,
your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) or trailer
sway is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-
tion.
Partial Off
The “ESC Off” button is located in the switch bank above
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
WARNING!
•
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
•
Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when start-
ing off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pressing the ⬙ESC off”
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure
— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the left
side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
•
Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
•
Install on Front Tires
•
Due to limited clearance, a 225/45R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good con-
dition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Re-
move the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s in-
structions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on “cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, a “Inflate Tire to XX”
message will be displayed for a minimum of five sec-
onds, and an audible chime will be activated when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The recommended cold placard pressure
value is the pressure value in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙
message displayed in the EVIC. The system will auto-
matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light
will extinguish and the “Inflate Tire to XX” message will
turn off once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime and display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for a minimum of 5 seconds. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and “Inflate Tire to XX” message will still turn ON due to
the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid and a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of
5 seconds.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid and a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of 5 seconds.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC will display a “Inflate Tire to XX”
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing or
displayed in a different color. The recommended cold
placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value
displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message displayed in
the EVIC.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
“Inflate Tire to XX” message will no longer be displayed,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
flashing or return to their normal color, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a system
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message is displayed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “Inflate Tire to
XX” message and the graphic with the low tire pressure
flashing or in a different color will be displayed.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure values.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. For
optimum performance and fuel economy
the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the right side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
3. Hang cap by tether on fill door to prevent damage to
body side.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Manual Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the
manual fuel filler door release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull right side of weather strip off of trunk carpet trim.
3. Pull back carpet to access fuel release cable behind
carpet.
4. Pull the release cable.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certi-
fication Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds,
contributing positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equal-
izing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights
(TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and
Trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
1.4L Turbo Engine
Trailer towing is not recommended.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L and 2.4L
Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of con-
trol of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steer-
ing, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmis-
sion, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Al-
ways block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(this requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur
while in this range, use the AutoStick威 shift control to
select a lower gear ratio.
NOTE: Using a lower gear ratio while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking. If you REGULARLY tow a
trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation,
then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified
for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to
the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance
intervals.
AutoStick威
When using the AutoStick威 shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high
RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when
grade or road conditions allow.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage it
until you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle
speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow None
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer All OK OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ............... 487
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ............... 487
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing .............. 488
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ....... 489
▫ Preparations For Jacking .............. 490
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire .......... 491
▫ Road Tire Installation ................ 496
䡵 TIREFIT Kit — If Equipped ............. 499
▫ TIREFIT Storage .................... 499
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . 499
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions ............ 501
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT ........... 503
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ............... 509
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ........... 510
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure .............. 511
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................ 513
䡵 Shift Lever Override .................. 514
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
4. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the
wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
•
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided.
•
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1.
Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jack and Spare Tire Fastener
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to
pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on
the sill flange.
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
•
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
•
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct
tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft/lb. (128 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Install the jack with
the base facing the front of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
•
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided.
•
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel which
are on each side of the valve stem. Install the wheel bolts
with the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct
tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft/lbs (128 N·m). If in
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel bolt
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct
tightness of each wheel bolt is 95 ft/lbs (128 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h).
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk under the load
floor.
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting
this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
•
Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
•
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use. After each use, always replace
these components immediately at an authorized
dealer.
•
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
•
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
•
You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is
only intended to seal punctures less than
1
⁄
4
in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
•
Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
•
Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
−
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
−
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
−
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
−
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
−
If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
−
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
•
Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
•
A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
•
TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
•
Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
•
After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the
TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if avail-
able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec-
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap-
proximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pres-
sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
•
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3.
Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door open-
ing.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser-
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the au-
thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of
it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the
front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn
the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your manual transmission vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking
motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and
forth between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or 1st
Gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. Using mini-
mal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: Automatic transmission vehicles cannot be
rocked in this manner, because the transmission will not
allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while the
wheels are turning.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission or clutch overheating and failure. Al-
low the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission or clutch failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE (automatic transmission) or 1st Gear
(manual transmission) and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center
console, then lift up the front of the shift lever/PRNDL
bezel, carefully disengage the bezel from the shift lever
housing, and slide it up to the top of the shift lever.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly, and
push and hold the white override release lever down.
Shift Lever/PRNDL Bezel
Override Release Tab
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever/PRNDL bezel (use care to
avoid pinching the wiring), and the rubber storage tray
liner.
Shift Lever
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
Automatic Transmission
Automatic transmission vehicles can be towed with the
front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Manual Transmission
•
Manual transmission vehicles can be flat towed (all
four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL.
•
Manual transmission vehicles can also be towed with
the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all
four wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition is
related to a clutch, transmission or driveline compo-
nent. Damage to the drivetrain could result.
All Transmissions
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the battery is discharged,
see “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmis-
sion out of PARK for towing.
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 1.4L Turbo ....... 523
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.0L ............ 524
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............ 525
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ..... 526
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .......... 526
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 527
䡵 Replacement Parts .................... 528
䡵 Dealer Service ....................... 529
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................ 529
▫ Engine Oil ........................ 530
▫ Engine Oil Filter .................... 533
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............. 533
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ............. 534
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ........... 535
▫ Body Lubrication ................... 538
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............. 539
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................ 540
7
▫ Exhaust System .................... 540
▫ Cooling System .................... 543
▫ Brake System ...................... 548
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped .... 550
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ...... 552
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 552
䡵 Fuses ............................. 560
▫ Interior Fuses ...................... 560
▫ Underhood Fuses ................... 561
䡵 Vehicle Storage ...................... 564
䡵 Replacement Bulbs ................... 564
䡵 Bulb Replacement .................... 565
▫ Headlamps ....................... 565
▫ Backup Lamps ..................... 566
▫ License Lamp ...................... 567
䡵 Fluid Capacities ..................... 568
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ...... 569
▫ Engine ........................... 569
▫ Chassis .......................... 570
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Power Distribution Center
2 — Engine Oil Level Indicator 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Battery
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-
hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range
will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator
range.
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection – 2.0L And 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 1.4L Turbo Engine
SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.0L And 2.4L
Engine
SAE 0W-20 API Certified engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20 API
Certified may be used as a temporary suitable alternative.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout. (located
on the right side of the center console).
2. Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
3. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
4. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining
tab fully engages the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
5. Install the passenger side console closeout.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer
fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the
wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds
the temperature range of your climate. This rating informa-
tion can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F(⫺37° C)
are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and
top lines marked “COLD FILL RANGE”.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant bottle overflow hoses are
not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality. Using a transmission
fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid will require more frequent fluid changes. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
Routine fluid level checks are not required. However, if
you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
fluid level checked. Operation with an improper fluid
level can greatly reduce the life of your transmission.
Transmission Fluid Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the
fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. Refer to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals. Also, if the fluid becomes contaminated (with
water, etc.) or the transmission is repaired, the fluid
should be changed.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes of corrosion are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels, Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
FUSES
Interior Fuses
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
F1
— 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seats
F2
— 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seats,
Heated Steering
Wheel
F3
— 10 Amp
Red
PAM, Rear Camera,
LBSS, RBSS, Com-
pass
F4
— 15 Amp
Blue
IPC
F5
— 10 Amp
Red
HVAC, Humidity
Sensor, In-Car Tem-
perature Sensor,
Inside Mirror As-
sembly
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
F18
— 15 Amp
Blue
Radio
F19
— 10 Amp
Red
Fuel Door
F20
— 10 Amp
Red
SCCM, SAS, Switch
Bank
F21
— 10 Amp
Red
Diagnostic Port
F22
— 10 Amp
Red
UGDO, EOM
F23
— 20 Amp
Yellow
Sunroof
F24
— 5 Amp
Tan
Direct Battery For
Underhood PDC
(RLY Coils)
F25
— 5 Amp
Tan
DDCT Feed #4
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
F26
— 5 Amp
Tan
Stop Lamp Switch
F27
— 10 Amp
Red
Pneumatic Lumbar
Support (Solenoid),
Pneumatic Lumbar
Support (Pump
Motor)
Underhood Fuses
The Integrated Power Module is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, behind the battery.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp
Tan
— Direct Battery
Feed #1 To BCM
F02 60 Amp
Blue
— Direct Battery
Feed #2 To BCM
Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F03 30 Amp
Green
— Output For Starter
Relay #1
F04 40 Amp
Orange
— ESP Pump Motor
F05 40 Amp
Orange
— DDCT Feed #1
(SDU)
F06 30 Amp
Green
— Direct Battery
Feed #3 To BCM
F07 40 Amp
Orange
— EBL RLY Coil,
Blower Motor RLY
Coil
F09 — 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan En-
able RLY, Radiator
Fan Enable RLY
Coil
F10 — 10 Amp
Red
ORC
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F11 — 20 Amp
Yellow
ECM, EPS, Backup
Lamp Switch
F14 — 15 Amp
Blue
DDCT Feed #2
F15 — 15 Amp
Blue
DDCT Feed #3
F16 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Coils, Coil
Capacitor
F17 — 15 Amp
Blue
ESC, Brake Pedal
Switch, OCM
F18 — 20 Amp
Yellow
ECM
F19 — 10 Amp
Red
A/C Compressor
Clutch
F20 — 30 Amp
Green
EBL
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
F22 — 10 Amp
Red
ORC
F23 — 25 Amp
Natural
ESC
F24 — 20 Amp
Yellow
ECM, Fuel Injec-
tors, Active Grill
Shutter (AGS)
F30 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
(Console)
F81 60 Amp
Blue
— Interior PDC Bat-
tery Feed, Power
Seats
F82 30 Amp
Green
— Amplifier
F83 40 Amp
Orange
— HVAC Blower Mo-
tor
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F84 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cigar Lighter
F85 — 10 Amp
Red
Sunroof, LRSM,
Power Outlet
(Console), UCI/
AUX Port, Cigar
Lighter
F86 — 20 Amp
Yellow
—
F87 — 10 Amp
Red
Wastegate, Purge
Solenoid, OBD
Vent Valve, Oxy-
gen Sensor Heat-
ers
F88 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Outside
Mirrors
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 35 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights Bulb Type
Dome Lamp........................... W5W
Overhead Console Lamp ..................W5W
Exterior Lights Bulb Type
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp). . HIR2
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) .... D3S
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp........... 7442NALL
Sidemarker Lamp ........................ 194
Front Fog Lamp ......................... H11
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) .....LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp ............ LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp .......................... 7440
License Lamp ........................... 168
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
Halogen Headlamps
Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside
of the headlamp. Remove the HIR2 bulb from the con-
nector and replacing the bulb. Reinstall bulb and cap.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove trim cover.
3. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clock-
wise to remove.
4. Replace bulb.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5.
Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to install.
6. Install trim cover.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (1.4L Aero Model Only) 13.2 Gallons 50 Liters
Fuel (All Others) 15.8 Gallons 59.8 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
2.0L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR威 OAT Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 OAT Antifreeze/Engine Cool-
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your en-
gine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. If 0W-20 engine oil is not avail-
able, SAE 5W-20 API Certified may be used as a temporary suitable alter-
native.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs (Gap 0.025 in [0.65 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm])
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 91 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection – 2.0L and 2.4L En-
gine
87 Octane
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Engine) – If Equipped
We recommend you use MOPAR威 C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine) – If Equipped
We recommend you use SK Energy ATF SP-4 Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR威 C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids or equivalent.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level.
•
Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change engine oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
•
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573
Maintenance Chart
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 23456789101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect CV joint boots. XXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and replace as
necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect brake linings, parking brake function. XXXXXXX
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin/air conditioning filter. XXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. XXXXX
Replace the spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine).** XXXXX
Replace the spark plugs (2.0L and 2.4L Engine).** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 23456789101112131415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the transmission fluid (manual or automatic
1.4L turbo engine only) if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sus-
tained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XXX
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter
(2.0L, 2.4L engines only) if you frequently drive: on
rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on short
trips, in heavy city traffic during hot weather, or while
towing a trailer, or if you use the vehicle for police, taxi,
or in a commercial fleet.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine). X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 579
▫ Prepare For The Appointment .......... 579
▫ Prepare A List ..................... 579
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ........... 579
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................ 579
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center .... 580
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center .... 580
▫ In Mexico Contact .................. 580
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 581
▫ Service Contract .................... 581
䡵 Warranty Information ................. 582
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ...................... 582
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ............... 582
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .................... 582
▫ In Canada ........................ 583
䡵 Publication Order Forms ............... 583
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 417
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........544
Adding Fuel ........................... 465
Adding Washer Fluid .....................540
Additives, Fuel .........................463
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 533
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 535
Air Conditioning ........................ 362
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 362
Air Conditioning Filter ................. 375,536
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............535,536
Air Conditioning System ............. 362,373,535
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 440
Airbag ..............................58,76
Airbag Deployment ....................... 77
Airbag Light ...................65,66,80,94,291
Airbag Maintenance .......................79
Airbag, Side ......................61,64,75,76
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 62,64,76
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................19
Alarm Light ........................... 291
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Alarm, Panic ............................ 25
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 417
Anti-Lock Warning Light .............294,417,419
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 19
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 544,568,569
Capacities .......................... 568
Disposal ........................... 546
Appearance Care ........................552
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........19
Assist, Hill Start ........................ 422
Assistance Towing ....................... 129
Auto Down Power Windows ................40
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................32
Auto Up Power Windows ..................40
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................104
588 INDEX
Automatic Door Locks .....................32
Automatic Headlights ..................... 211
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 373
Automatic Transaxle ...................... 382
Automatic Transmission ................ 388,550
Adding Fluid .......................551
Fluid and Filter Changes ...............551
Fluid Level Check ....................551
Fluid Type .........................550
Gear Ranges ..................... 392,402
Special Additives .....................551
Autostick .............................408
B-Pillar Location ........................435
Battery ...............................534
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .....26
Belts, Seat ............................ 48,94
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............538
Brake Assist System ......................419
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 417
Brake Fluid ............................ 570
Brake System ...........................548
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................417
Master Cylinder ..................... 548
Parking ...........................413
Warning Light ....................... 289
Brake, Parking .......................... 413
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............391
Brakes ............................... 548
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........ 91
Brightness, Interior Lights .................. 217
Bulb Replacement ..................... 564,565
Bulbs, Light ..........................96,564
Camera, Rear ...........................243
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........568
Capacities, Fluid ........................568
10
INDEX 589
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................465
Oil (Engine) ...................524,525,532
Car Washes ............................553
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............93,464
CD (Compact Disc) Player .................351
Cellular Phone ....................... 115,361
Chains, Tire ............................ 449
Changing A Flat Tire .....................488
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................430
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............. 294,527
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............92
Checks, Safety ...........................92
Child Restraint ....................81,83,87,89
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............85,87
Child Safety Locks ........................33
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 461
Cleaning
Wheels ............................ 555
Climate Control .........................361
Clock ................................340
Clutch ............................... 548
Clutch Fluid ...........................548
Coin Holder ........................... 267
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............360
Compact Disc (CD) Player .................351
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 443
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 304
Connector
UCI ..............................352
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......352
Conserving Fuel ........................ 321
Console, Floor .......................... 267
Console, Overhead ....................... 246
Contract, Service ........................ 581
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................568,569
590 INDEX
Cooling System ......................... 543
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 544
Coolant Level ....................543,546
Disposal of Used Coolant ...............546
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................543
Inspection .......................... 546
Points to Remember ................ 545,547
Pressure Cap ........................545
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........544
Corrosion Protection .....................552
Cupholders ............................264
Customer Assistance ..................... 579
Data Recorder, Event ......................80
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ...........219
Daytime Running Lights ................... 213
Dealer Service ..........................529
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................44
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................43
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 274
Defroster, Windshield ................94,365,371
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 220
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 526
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 216
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................551
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 546
Engine Oil .........................532
Door Locks ............................. 30
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 32
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 248
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................199
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ..................410
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water .............................411
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ....321
10
INDEX 591
Electric Rear Window Defrost ...............274
Electric Remote Mirrors ................... 106
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 260
Electronic Brake Control System .............417
Brake Assist System ................... 419
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............420
Electronic Stability Program ............. 424
Traction Control System ................420
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ............. 420
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 226
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............424
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
. . 243,297
Emergency Deck Lid Release ................ 44
Emergency Trunk Release ................... 44
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .............513
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............487
Jacking ............................488
Jump Starting ....................... 509
Overheating ........................ 487
Towing ............................ 517
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 527
Engine ............................ 524,525
Block Heater ........................385
Break-In Recommendations .............. 91
Checking Oil Level ................... 530
Compartment .......................523
Cooling ........................... 543
Exhaust Gas Caution ................93,464
Fuel Requirements ....................460
Jump Starting ....................... 509
Oil ......................... 530,568,569
Oil Change Interval ...................531
Oil Filler Cap .................. 524,525,532
Oil Filter ...........................569
Oil Selection ........................ 531
Overheating ........................ 487
Temperature Gauge ................... 286
592 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 77
Entry System, Illuminated ..................22
Ethanol ...............................461
Event Data Recorder ......................80
Exhaust Gas Caution ................... 93,464
Exhaust System ....................... 93,540
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................105
Exterior Lighting ........................210
Exterior Lights .......................... 96
Filler Location Fuel ......................292
Filters
Air Cleaner .........................533
Air Conditioning ..................375,536
Automatic Transmission ................551
Engine Oil ....................... 533,569
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 216
Flashers
Hazard Warning .....................487
Turn Signal .................... 96,215,286
Flat Tire Changing ....................... 488
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 384
Floor Console .......................... 267
Fluid Capacities ......................... 568
Fluid Leaks .............................96
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................551
Fluid, Brake ...........................570
Fluids ................................ 569
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 569
Fog Lights .......................... 214,288
Folding Rear Seat ........................ 206
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................513
Fuel .............................. 460,569
Additives ..........................463
Capacity ........................... 568
Clean Air .......................... 461
Conserving .........................321
10
INDEX 593
Ethanol ........................... 461
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..................465
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ..................292
Gasoline ........................... 460
Gauge ............................290
Light ..........................292,313
Materials Added .....................463
Methanol ..........................461
Octane Rating ....................... 460
Requirements ....................... 460
Saver Mode ........................321
Tank Capacity .......................568
Fuel Optimizer ......................... 321
Fuel Saver ............................. 321
Fuel System Caution ..................... 466
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ........... 248
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............465,526
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 568
Conserving .........................321
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 461
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 461
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 286
Fuel ..............................290
Speedometer ........................290
Tachometer .........................284
Gear Ranges ......................386,392,402
Gear Select Lever Override ................. 514
General Information ............ 19,26,143,177,460
General Maintenance ..................... 529
Glass Cleaning ..........................558
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 471
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............468,470
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............115
594 INDEX
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................411
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................487
Head Restraints ......................... 203
Head Rests ............................203
Headlights ............................ 565
Automatic ..........................211
Cleaning ...........................558
Delay ............................. 211
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 216
Lights On Reminder .................. 213
On With Wipers ................... 211,221
Passing ............................216
Switch ............................210
Time Delay .........................211
Heated Mirrors ......................... 106
Heated Seats ........................... 200
Heater ...............................362
Heater, Engine Block .....................385
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 216
Hill Start Assist ......................... 422
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................472
Holder, Coin ........................... 267
Holder, Cup ...........................264
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 248
Ignition
Key ............................... 12
Illuminated Entry ........................22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................17
Infant Restraint ........................81,82
Information Center, Vehicle .................297
Inside Rearview Mirror ................... 103
Instrument Cluster ....................281,284
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 280
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 558
10
INDEX 595
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............559
Interior Appearance Care ..................557
Interior Lights ..........................217
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........220
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ........................... 489
Jack Operation .......................... 491
Jacking Instructions ......................491
Jump Starting .......................... 509
Key-In Reminder .........................16
Key, Programming ........................ 19
Key, Replacement ........................ 18
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ................... 34,382
Keyless Entry System ......................22
Keyless Go ............................. 13
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................58
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 215
Lane Change Assist ......................215
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................48
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ..... 85,87
Latch Plate .............................49
Latches ................................96
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 460
Leaks, Fluid ............................96
Life of Tires ............................ 446
Light Bulbs ..........................96,564
Lights .............................. 96,210
Airbag ....................65,66,80,94,291
Alarm ............................291
Anti-Lock ....................... 294,419
Automatic Headlights .................211
Brake Warning ...................... 289
596 INDEX
Bulb Replacement ....................565
Daytime Running ....................213
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........215,216
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 425
Exterior ............................ 96
Fog............................214,288
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............487
Headlight Switch .....................210
Headlights ......................210,565
Headlights On Reminder ...............213
Headlights On With Wipers .......... 211,221
High Beam ......................... 216
High Beam Indicator ..................288
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............ 216
Illuminated Entry .....................22
Instrument Cluster ................... 210
Intensity Control ..................... 217
Interior ............................ 217
License ............................567
Lights On Reminder .................. 213
Low Fuel .......................292,313
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......294
Oil Pressure ........................ 293
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ........ 219
Passing ............................216
Reading ........................216,246
Seat Belt Reminder ...................288
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............ 291
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) ................ 294
SmartBeams ........................212
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............ 291
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ......... 284
Traction Control .....................425
Turn Signal .......................96,215
Vanity Mirror .......................107
Voltage ............................ 293
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 284
10
INDEX 597
Loading Vehicle ...................... 468,469
Capacities .......................... 469
Tires.............................. 435
Locks .................................30
Auto Unlock ......................... 32
Automatic Door ......................32
Child Protection ...................... 33
Door ..............................30
Power Door ......................... 31
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................85,87
Lubrication, Body ....................... 538
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 534
Maintenance Procedures ...................529
Maintenance Schedule ....................572
Maintenance, General .....................529
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 294,527
Manual Transaxle ........................ 381
Manual Transmission ..................386,552
Fluid Level Check ....................552
Frequency of Fluid Change ............. 552
Lubricant Selection ...................552
Shift Speeds ........................ 386
Manual, Service .........................583
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................548
Methanol ............................. 461
Mini-Trip Computer ......................304
Mirrors ...............................103
Automatic Dimming .................. 104
Electric Powered .....................106
Electric Remote ......................106
Exterior Folding .....................105
Heated ............................106
Outside ........................... 104
Rearview ..........................103
Vanity ............................ 107
598 INDEX
Mode
Fuel Saver ......................... 321
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............452
Mopar Parts .........................528,582
MTBE/ETBE ...........................461
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 215
Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) ..........243
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 91
Occupant Restraints ................... 45,64,77
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...........61,62,64,76
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 460
Odometer .............................292
Oil Change Indicator .................. 293,299
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............293,299
Oil, Engine ......................... 530,568
Capacity ........................... 568
Change Interval .....................531
Checking .......................... 530
Disposal ........................... 532
Filter .............................533
Materials Added to ................... 532
Recommendation .................. 531,568
Viscosity ...........................532
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............526,527
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ...........248
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................. 104
Overhead Console ....................... 246
Overheating, Engine ...................286,487
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,583
Paint Care ............................. 552
Panic Alarm ............................ 25
Park Sense System, Rear ...................230
Parking Brake ..........................413
10
INDEX 599
Passing Light ........................... 216
Pets ..................................91
Phone, Cellular ......................... 115
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........435
Power
Deck Lid Release ..................... 43
Door Locks ......................... 31
Mirrors ............................ 106
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........260
Sunroof ........................... 257
Windows ...........................39
Power Steering Fluid .....................570
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............57
Preparation for Jacking ....................490
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...........................56
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................22
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 442
Radio Operation ........................361
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ................222
Rear Camera ...........................243
Rear Cupholder ......................... 265
Rear Park Sense System ...................230
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 206
Rear Window Defroster ................... 274
Rear Window Features .................... 274
Rearview Mirrors ........................ 103
Recorder, Event Data ......................80
Recreational Towing ......................483
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 461
Refrigerant ............................536
Reminder, Lights On ..................... 213
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................56
Remote Control
Starting System .......................27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 22
600 INDEX
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........359
Remote Starting System .................... 27
Remote Trunk Release .....................43
Replacement Bulbs .......................564
Replacement Keys ........................ 18
Replacement Parts .......................528
Replacement Tires .......................447
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 582
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..............293
Restraint, Head .........................203
Restraints, Child .........................81
Restraints, Occupant ......................45
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................513
Rotation, Tires ..........................451
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 94
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 96
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................582
Safety Information, Tire ...................428
Safety Tips ............................. 92
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................93
Schedule, Maintenance ....................572
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 559
Seat Belt Reminder .......................56
Seat Belts .......................... 45,48,94
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......53
And Pregnant Women ..................57
Child Restraint .................81,82,83,89
Extender ........................... 57
Front Seat .........................48,49
Inspection ..........................94
Operating Instructions ..................49
Pretensioners ........................ 56
Rear Seat ...........................48
Untwisting Procedure .................. 53
Seats .................................195
Adjustment ......................195,198
Head Restraints ......................203
10
INDEX 601
Heated ............................200
Rear Folding ........................206
Seatback Release ..................199,206
Tilting ............................ 199
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................ 19
Selection of Oil ......................... 531
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................17
Sentry Key Programming ................... 19
Sentry Key Replacement ................... 18
Service Assistance ....................... 579
Service Contract ......................... 581
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................294
Service Manuals ........................ 583
Setting the Clock ........................340
Shift Lever Override ......................514
Shifting
Manual Transmission .................. 386
Short Message Service (SMS) ................ 137
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage .............. 53
Shoulder Belts ...........................48
Side Airbag ............................. 75
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............... 104
Signals, Turn ...................... 96,215,286
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 410
SmartBeams ...........................212
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 449
Snow Tires ............................450
Spare Tire ....................... 443,444,489
Specifications
Oil ...............................531
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............226
Speedometer ...........................290
Starting ............................. 27,381
Automatic Transmission ................382
Engine Fails to Start ..................384
Manual Transmission .................. 381
Remote ............................27
602 INDEX
Starting Procedures ......................381
Steering
Column Controls ..................... 215
Column Lock .......................223
Tilt Column ........................ 223
Wheel, Heated ......................224
Wheel, Tilt ......................... 223
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............. 359
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................359
Storage ............................266,564
Storage, Vehicle .........................374
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 513
Sun Roof .............................. 257
Sun Visor Extension ...................... 107
Sunglasses Storage .......................247
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 58
Sway Control, Trailer .....................421
System, Remote Starting ....................27
Tachometer ............................284
Telescoping Steering Column ............... 223
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........373
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ....... 286,488
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 85
Text Messaging ......................... 137
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................ 19
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Tilt Steering Column .....................223
Time Delay, Headlight ....................211
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 435
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............432
Tire Markings ..........................428
Tire Safety Information ....................428
TIREFIT ..............................499
Tires ............................ 96,439,585
Aging (Life of Tires) ..................446
Air Pressure ........................ 439
Chains ............................ 449
10
INDEX 603
Changing .......................488,491
Compact Spare ...................... 443
Flat Changing .......................488
General Information .................. 439
High Speed ......................... 442
Inflation Pressures .................... 440
Jacking .........................490,491
Life of Tires ........................446
Load Capacity ....................435,436
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ......... 452
Pressure Warning Light ................ 284
Quality Grading .....................585
Radial ............................ 442
Replacement ........................447
Rotation ...........................451
Safety ..........................428,439
Sizes .............................430
Snow Tires .........................450
Spare Tire .......................... 489
Spinning ...........................445
Tread Wear Indicators ................. 446
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............474
Towing ............................... 470
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............. 129
Disabled Vehicle .....................517
Guide .............................473
Recreational ........................ 483
Weight ............................473
Towing Assistance .......................129
Traction ..............................410
Traction Control ......................... 420
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................421
Trailer Towing .......................... 470
Cooling System Tips .................. 482
Hitches ............................472
Minimum Requirements ................ 475
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............474
Wiring ............................ 479
604 INDEX
Trailer Towing Guide .....................473
Trailer Weight ..........................473
Transaxle
Automatic ......................... 382
Autostick ..........................408
Manual ...........................381
Transmission
Automatic ....................... 388,550
Filter .............................551
Maintenance ........................550
Manual .........................386,552
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................26
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................22
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 248
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 22
Transporting Pets ........................ 91
Tread Wear Indicators ....................446
Trip Odometer .......................... 292
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .................... 43,44
Trunk Release Remote Control ............... 43
Trunk Release, Emergency .................. 44
Turn Signals .........................215,286
UCI Connector .........................352
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................585
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 352
Universal Transmitter .....................248
Unleaded Gasoline ....................... 460
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............53
Vanity Mirrors .......................... 107
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 468
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................436,468,469
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
10
INDEX 605
Vehicle Storage ....................... 374,564
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 19
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 178
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 487
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description)
...284
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................582
Washer
Adding Fluid .......................540
Washers, Windshield ..................... 221
Washing Vehicle ......................... 553
Water
Driving Through .....................411
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................555
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................555
Wind Buffeting .......................43,259
Window Fogging ........................375
Windows ..............................39
Power .............................39
Windshield Defroster ...................94,365
Windshield Washers ...................219,221
Windshield Wipers .................... 219,539
Wipers, Intermittent ......................220
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ....................222
606 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2013
2013
13PFD41-126-AG Seventh Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
